2025 VOYAGER OWNER’S MANUAL
This Owner Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install
them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore. This Owner Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date
Owner Handbook, Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehi-
cle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner Handbook for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................6
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE............................................................ 10
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL...................................56
3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING.............................................................................71
4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................................................100
5
6 SAFETY.....................................................................................................................121
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY............................................................................... 168
7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................189
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 233
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................................................................238
10
11 INDEX...................................................................................................................... 243
11
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME .............................................................6
SYMBOLS KEY.......................................................7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............7
SYMBOL GLOSSARY..............................................7
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ................................................................... 10
Key Fob...........................................................10
SENTRY KEY........................................................12
IGNITION SWITCH................................................12
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition.......................12
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED......................... 13
How To Use Remote Start..............................14
To Exit Remote Start Mode............................14
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped................................................ 15
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped................................................... 15
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped...........................15
Remote Start Abort Message........................15
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 15
To Arm The System ....................................... 16
To Disarm The System...................................16
Rearming Of The System...............................16
Security System Manual Override.................16
DOORS.................................................................16
Manual Door Locks........................................16
Power Door Locks — If Equipped...................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry..........17
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If
Equipped................................................... 19
Manual Sliding Side Door..............................19
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped........ 20
Child Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors................................................ 21
STEERING WHEEL ..............................................22
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column.................22
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped..........22
SEATS ..................................................................22
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 23
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)................. 23
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 30
Heated Seats................................................. 32
Head Restraints.............................................32
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF
EQUIPPED.......................................................34
Introducing Voice Recognition...................... 34
Basic Voice Commands.................................34
Get Started.....................................................34
Additional Information...................................35
MIRRORS.............................................................35
Inside Rearview Mirror.................................. 35
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped..... 35
Outside Mirrors.............................................. 35
Conversation Mirror.......................................36
Power Mirrors — If Equipped......................... 36
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................... 36
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 36
LIGHTING OPERATION........................................ 36
Multifunction Lever........................................36
Headlight Switch............................................36
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped................................................... 37
High/Low Beam Switch................................. 37
Flash-To-Pass .................................................37
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped.............37
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped.............38
Lights-On Reminder.......................................38
Turn Signals....................................................38
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............... 38
Battery Protection.......................................... 38
INTERIOR LIGHTS................................................38
Interior Courtesy Lights................................. 38
WINDSHIELD WIPER & WASHERS..................... 39
Windshield Wiper Operation......................... 39
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped..............40
Rear Wiper And Washer.................................41
CLIMATE CONTROLS .......................................... 41
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions............................................41
Climate Voice Commands............................. 45
Operating Tips ...............................................46
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT...............47
Storage........................................................... 47
USB/AUX Control ...........................................49
Power Outlets ................................................50
WINDOWS............................................................51
Power Windows.............................................. 51
Automatic Window Features......................... 52
2
Reset Auto Up................................................ 53
Wind Buffeting............................................... 53
HOOD ..................................................................53
Opening.......................................................... 53
To Close The Hood......................................... 54
LIFTGATE..............................................................54
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate........................ 54
To Lock/Close The Liftgate........................... 54
Power Liftgate — If Equipped........................ 54
Cargo Area Features......................................55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................................... 56
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................... 57
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...................57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...................... 58
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls..............................................58
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon.........59
Oil Life Reset.................................................. 59
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......60
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped............. 62
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES...................63
Red Warning Lights........................................64
Yellow Warning Lights....................................66
Yellow Indicator Lights...................................68
Green Indicator Lights...................................68
White Indicator Lights....................................69
Blue Indicator Lights......................................69
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II........ 69
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity............................................ 69
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ......................... 69
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE.......................................71
Normal Starting..............................................71
AutoPark......................................................... 71
Extended Park Starting................................. 73
If Engine Fails To Start................................... 74
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C)..................................................74
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine..... 74
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button.................................. 74
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........... 74
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS.......... 75
PARKING BRAKE................................................. 75
Electric Park Brake (EPB).............................. 75
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION...............................77
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 78
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System............................................78
9-Speed Automatic Transmission.................78
Gear Ranges.................................................. 79
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION........................... 80
POWER STEERING.............................................. 80
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............... 81
Autostop Mode...............................................81
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.....................................................81
To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/
Start...........................................................82
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.......................................................82
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.......................................................82
System Malfunction.......................................82
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED....82
Cruise Control................................................ 82
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED.......................................................84
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 84
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 84
ParkSense Display.........................................84
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 86
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System............................................86
Cleaning The ParkSense System..................87
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 87
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............................88
LaneSense Operation....................................88
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 88
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 88
Changing LaneSense Status.........................89
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA..................90
REFUELING THE VEHICLE...................................90
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................91
Certification Label..........................................91
TRAILER TOWING ............................................... 92
3
Common Towing Definitions......................... 92
Trailer Hitch Classification.............................93
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)............................. 93
Vehicle Loading Chart................................... 94
Trailer And Tongue Weight.............................95
Towing Requirements ...................................95
Towing Tips .................................................... 97
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)................................................ 97
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle....................................................... 97
DRIVING TIPS...................................................... 98
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 98
Driving Through Water ..................................98
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................100
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................100
UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................... 100
Customer Programmable Features ........... 101
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............ 120
Radio Operation.......................................... 120
Media Mode.................................................120
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....120
Regulatory And Safety Information............ 120
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES............................................121
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 121
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA).............. 121
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System......122
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS......................... 126
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped.................................................126
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped........................ 129
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).. 131
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 134
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 134
Important Safety Precautions.....................134
Seat Belt Systems ...................................... 134
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).....142
Child Restraints .......................................... 151
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................164
Transporting Passengers............................ 164
Transporting Pets ....................................... 165
Connected Vehicles.....................................165
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................165
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle..................... 166
Exhaust Gas ................................................166
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .......................167
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................ 168
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED..... 168
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED.....................................................170
Preparations For Jacking ............................171
Jack And Spare Tire Location......................171
Equipment Removal.....................................171
Jacking Instructions ....................................172
Road Tire Installation.................................. 175
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped......176
Return Inflatable Spare Tire........................177
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED................... 177
JUMP STARTING................................................182
Preparations For Jump Start.......................183
Jump Starting Procedure............................ 183
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED . 184
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 185
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................185
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................186
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 187
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................188
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................188
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................................. 189
Maintenance Plan....................................... 189
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................192
3.6L Engine..................................................192
Checking Oil Level....................................... 193
Adding Washer Fluid................................... 193
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................... 193
Pressure Washing........................................193
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE.................................. 194
Engine Oil ....................................................194
Engine Oil Filter ...........................................194
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................194
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................. 195
Air Conditioner Maintenance......................196
Body Lubrication .........................................198
4
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........................198
Exhaust System ..........................................200
Cooling System............................................ 201
Brake System ..............................................203
Automatic Transmission .............................204
Fuses............................................................205
Bulb Replacement ......................................214
TIRES................................................................. 216
Tire Safety Information ...............................216
Tires — General Information ...................... 222
Tire Types..................................................... 225
Spare Tires — If Equipped...........................226
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 227
Snow Traction Devices................................ 228
Tire Rotation Recommendations................229
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...............229
Treadwear.................................................... 229
Traction Grades........................................... 229
Temperature Grades................................... 230
STORING THE VEHICLE.................................... 230
BODYWORK.......................................................230
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........230
Body And Underbody Maintenance............231
Preserving The Bodywork............................231
INTERIORS ....................................................... 231
Seats And Fabric Parts................................231
Plastic And Coated Parts............................ 232
Leather Surfaces.........................................232
Glass Surfaces ........................................... 232
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 233
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................ 233
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . 233
Torque Specifications..................................233
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................234
3.6L Engine .................................................234
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 234
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...................... 234
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles...................................................234
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.... 235
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline............... 235
Materials Added To Fuel .............................235
Fuel System Cautions..................................235
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................ 236
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................. 236
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................237
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................... 238
Prepare For The Appointment.................... 238
Prepare A List.............................................. 238
Be Reasonable With Requests...................238
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 238
Roadside Assistance...................................238
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................... 239
FCA Canada Customer Care....................... 239
Mexico..........................................................239
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............239
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 240
Service Contract.......................................... 240
WARRANTY INFORMATION............................... 240
MOPAR® PARTS................................................240
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS.........................240
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C..................................... 240
In Canada..................................................... 241
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS.......................... 241
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS..........241
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................. 241
5
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
6 INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating proce-
dures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on eas-
ier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional informa-
tion on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information per-
taining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
ð
page 63.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
ð
page 64
Battery Charge Warning Light
ð
page 64
Brake Warning Light
ð
page 64
Door Open Warning Light
ð
page 64
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
ð
page 64
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
ð
page 65
INTRODUCTION 7
1
Red Warning Lights
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 65
Hood Open Warning Light
ð
page 65
Liftgate Open Warning Light
ð
page 65
Oil Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 65
Oil Pressure Warning Light
ð
page 65
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
ð
page 65
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 66
Vehicle Security Warning Light
ð
page 66
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
ð
page 66
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
ð
page 66
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
ð
page 66
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
ð
page 66
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
ð
page 66
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
ð
page 67
Low Fuel Warning Light
ð
page 67
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
ð
page 67
8 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) Warning Light
ð
page 67
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
ð
page 67
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
ð
page 67
Yellow Indicator Lights
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) OFF Indicator Light
ð
page 68
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
ð
page 68
Front Fog Indicator Light
ð
page 68
Green Indicator Lights
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
ð
page 68
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
ð
page 68
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
ð
page 68
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 69
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
ð
page
69
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
ð
page 69
INTRODUCTION 9
1
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start (if
equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock all
doors and liftgate, as well as activate the Panic Alarm
from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the
key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become
depleted. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the
LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no
longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, then
the key fob battery requires replacement.
● The key fob LED light brightness is designed for
indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be
visible in direct sunlight
ð
page 241.
Key Fob
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — Panic Alarm
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s front door and sliding door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and the liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp. Settings in the Uconnect system
can change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will unlock
again only if the key fob is inside the passenger
compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within the Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN
or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old
batteries by placing them in correct containers
according to the law or by taking them to a
dealership, where they will be handled appropriately.
● Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of the key
fob with your thumb and then pulling the key out
with y
our other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat-blade screwdriver into the
now exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides
to disengage the snaps. Gently remove the back
cover from the fob, being careful not to damage
any of the snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward
in its pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove
the depleted battery from the battery pocket and
dispose appropriately.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the
positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the
battery into the pocket until it is firmly seated in
place and secured under both tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position and
snap it back in place by pushing it against the fob
until it is seated all around.
WARNING!
● The int
egrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
● Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
WARNING!
● Alw
ays remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Emergency keys must be ordered to the correct key
cut to match the vehicle locks.
● It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine.
The system does not need to be armed or activated.
Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key
fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
t
o start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
ð
page
241
.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START,
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● The engine is stopped
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
ACC
● The engine is stopped
● Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows)
ON/RUN
● Driving position
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
START
● The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition position or
from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key
fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
WARNING!
● When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation for theives. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from
starting the vehicle.
● For the proper engine starting procedure, see
ð
page 71
.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
ð
page 241.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HO
W TO
U
SE
REMO
TE
STAR
T
Push and release the R
emote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● F
or security, power window operations are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Liftgate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
● Panic button not pushed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
● Ignition in OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or conf
ined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
(Continued)
WARNING!
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again,
or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15
minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
● For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will show in the
instrument cluster display until you push the START/
STOP ignition button.
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
14 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system
will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes
or less. The time is dependent on the ambient
temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defroster will automatically turn on in cold weather
conditions. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will also turn on if programmed
in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 100. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed via the Comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal
temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
● In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
● In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
● In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
ð
page 41.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
● Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
● Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
● Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
● Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated,
the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors
and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
system provides both audible and visible signals. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the parking lights and/or
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
● Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
ð
page 17.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
ð
page 17.
● Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
○ For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/
STOP ignition button (requires at least one valid
k
ey fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
● The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone
enters the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains activ
e) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each
door trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull
the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the
door lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock
the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
● For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
● Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound
if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a
door is open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the
OFF position and remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature
of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
the Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
● If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, position
lamps) for the duration of 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn
signals.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
● The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the security system (if equipped).
● The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the
outside using the Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing
the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver’s side
doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. Grabbing the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors
and the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
● Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 100
.
● All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
● A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a
door is open.
● A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
● A lock req
uest is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a key fob inside the car, and it does not detect
any key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle,
and no valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are met:
● The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
● Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
● There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob
can be locked in the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the
door handle lock button to lock all four doors and the
liftgate.
18 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
● After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle, without the
v
ehicle unlocking.
● If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-
Safe)" remains active/functional.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push
the electronic liftgate release handle for a power open
on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the
electronic liftgate handle and lift for manual liftgate
vehicles
ð
page 241.
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT — IF
EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the gear selector has been placed
into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been
driven (the gear selector has been placed out of PARK
and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the door
locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 100.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or
the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to
open the sliding door. The sliding door inside handle
functions by rocking forward and back. Rocking the
handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward
releases the hold open latch in order to close the door.
NOTE:
If equipped with power sliding doors, using the manual
door handle will activate the power opening/closing
function. Allow the door to open or close fully on its
own, without forcing it.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
To keep your door operating properly, observe the
following guidelines:
● Always open the door smoothly.
● Avoid high impacts against the door stop when
opening the door. This is very important when your
vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide
faster in the downhill direction.
● There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the
fuel door is open.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR — IF EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed
in several ways:
● Key fob
● Inside or outside handles
● Buttons located:
○ In the overhead console
○ Just inside the sliding door
○ On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open, close, or reverse a
power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console
button will operate the door when the door is locked.
All other ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If
the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the
button on the outside handle will unlock and open the
sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
There are power sliding side door switches located on
the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
door for the rear seat passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles
or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the overhead
console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When
the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power off
button will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
● If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will
automatically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with
sliding door movements.
● If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it will power open on the next command.
Power Sliding Side Door Switch (Left Side Shown)
WARNING!
● P
ersonal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure
the door path is clear before closing the door.
● Before driving off, check the instrument cluster
for a sliding door or door open message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the sliding door open while
driving.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM —
REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the
vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
● After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the locked position.
● After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the unlock
ed position.
● The inside door handle will not open the sliding door
when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
● The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position.
●
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door
Power Off button, located in the overhead console.
When the overhead console power off LED is lit, the
sliding door may not be power opened or closed
when pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
doors, or when pulling on the handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
R
emember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child
Protection Door Locks are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage the
Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with
the sliding door closed to make certain the Child
Protection Door Lock is in the desired position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within
the Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the
instrument panel below the radio. You can access the
button through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 15.
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type or material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The inside door handle will open the sliding door when
the Child Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located left of the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Adjuster
If equipped with manual front seats, they are adjustable
forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment
handle is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment (if equipped)
3 — Recline Lever
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped
The seat height can be raised or lowered by using a
lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump
the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the
lever downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline
lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
WARNING!
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline — Stow ‘n Go Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Stow ‘n Go Seats
NOTE:
● You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion may return to its normal shape.
Having an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging
the fabric by hand may smooth away any excess
wrinkling.
● Permanent wrinkles may still result.
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
24 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
● The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position. Use
the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
● If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when returning
the seat to the original position, the headrest must
be folded back to the original position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy
entry into the third row with or without a child seat
installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat
is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats) that
provides easier access to the third row by tilting
the seat forward.
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the
handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access
the third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position, just
pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into
position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injur
y or death ma
y occur
.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat
by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part
of the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make
sure the arm rests are folded up.
Recliner Lever
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded
seat and make sure that it locks into position.
Then, pull the seatback toward the back and fold
down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third
row passengers can pull the strap and push the seat
forward to fold the seatback down and tilt the seat to
the floor for an easy exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat installed.
Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
NOTE:
● You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion may return to its normal shape.
Having an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging
the fabric by hand may smooth away any excess
wrinkling.
● Permanent wrinkles may still result.
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide and
pushing the head restraint down.
26 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of
the storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to
its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
● In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
● Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor
for convenient storage.
SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO
To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat all
the way forward using the manual seat adjustment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
bar. Move the seatback all the way forward using the
recliner handle located on the outboard side of the
cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid-position
using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of
the cushion.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat
(if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked
position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
● Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
● Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
● For information on storage bin function with the
seats rearward
ð
page 48
.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the storage
area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by
grabbing the strap on the lower part of the
seatback, and guide the seat into the storage area.
Pull Strap
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat into
the storage area.
Push To Lock
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards
by the bottom corner edge of the panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
● Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
● Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
● The storage bin cover must be latched and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
● Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the stowed position with the seatback upright
otherwise damage to the seat may occur.
TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS
To unstow the seat from the floor, move the front seat
all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment
bar.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat
(if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked
position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
● Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
● Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat
out of the storage area. Push the seat rearward
making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the
seatback into the upright position and pull the
headrest up.
NOTE:
If the seatback is locked, it will be necessary to
use the recliner handle to unlock the back before
folding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the storage
area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its original
state, grab the bottom corner and extend it
outward.
Extend Panel
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it
clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
● In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
● Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way
power seat for the driver. The power seat switches are
located on the outboard side of the seat. The switches
control the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward
by using the seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
im
pede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Power Lumbar Switch Location
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a four-way
lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar switch is located
on the outboard side of the equipped power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward
or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat
settings. The indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
● Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
● The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 15.
WARNING!
● Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
● Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driv
er, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward. The front head
restraints are also adjustable forward and rearward. To
tilt forward, pull the top of the head restraint toward the
front of the vehicle to the desired position. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, continue pulling forward
on the top of the head restraint to the farthest forward
position and the head restraint will return to the upright
position.
32 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted
to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes
and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
WARNING!
● A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death
to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● ALL the head restraints MUS
T be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row Stow ‘n
Go Seats
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head restraints
are non-adjustable and non-removable. Do not pull on
non-adjustable head restraints when folding the seat.
For information on child seat tether routing, see
ð
page 134
.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release
strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
NOTE:
● The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised
and lowered for tether routing or height adjustment
ð
page 134.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far
as it can go. Then, push the release button and
the adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the
head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, using the adjustment
button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate
height.
Adjustment Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF
EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menus of your 10.1-inch touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
5 with 10.1-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake Up word,
“Hey Uconnect”. The factory default Wake Up word
is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
● “
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
● “
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
● “
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
R
ecognition system’s status.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have voice recognition buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® by initiating a Siri or Google Assistant voice
recognition session. Depending on your device, you may
need to press and hold the VR button for one second to
begin a voice recognition session.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
Up” word and state your command.
● A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on the
radio status bar to also issue a command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command or saying the vehicle’s “Wake Up” word
and saying a command from the current category.
34 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have voice recognition buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® by initiating a Siri or Google Assistant voice
recognition session. Depending on your device, you may
need to press and hold the VR button for one second to
begin a voice recognition session.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The V
oice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,
And Send Or Receive A Text. For Vehicles Not
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To
Answer An Incoming Phone Call.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
ð
page 241.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward
the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — IF
EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirr
or will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push
the panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the
mirror and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Control Switch
3 — Right Mirror Select
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating
the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
two detent positions:
● Full forward position
● Full rearward position
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
ð
page 41.
LIGHTING OPERATION
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column. The multifunction lever controls
the turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-
to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
and interior lights.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the first detent for parking lights and
instrument panel lights operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlights, parking
lights and instrument panel operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking light and instrument
panel light position to the first detent to turn on the
headlights also. Rotate to the second detent, AUTO
position, to turn on automatic headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
● For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
● If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
ð
page 100
.
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the AUTO
on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means
your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the Automatic mode.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your
vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. The 90
second delay interval begins when headlight switch is
turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned
back on or the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
delay will be canceled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds
or not remain on. You can change the timer setting
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle
will chime when the driver's door is opened.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on,
a chime will sound and a message will display in the
cluster to alert the driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY PROTECTION
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or parking
lights are left on for extended periods of time when the
ignition is in the OFF position. After eight minutes of
the ignition being in the OFF position and the headlight
switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights
will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the
ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition is placed in any position other than OFF during
the eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
● Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the
battery from discharging once the doors are closed.
● If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the
OFF position.
38 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/
reading lights. The lights turn on when a front door,
a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle
is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob
is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch,
and are located on the driver’s side of the instrument
panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the
left dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels
of the ambient lighting on the instrument panel and
doors.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer,
all the int
erior lights will illuminat
e. A
t the bo
tt
om
most se
tting (e
xtreme bo
tt
om) int
erior lights are turned
off (dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument
lighting go t
o their lo
w
est dimmable se
tting.
WINDSHIELD WIPER & WASHERS
The windshield wiper/w
asher controls are located on
the right side of the st
eering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of
the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within
the lever all the way down to OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Washer And Wiper Controls
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead t
o a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end
of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then
turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several cycles, then turn off.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
ð
page 198.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent
positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is
the most sensitive.
NOTE:
● The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
● The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
● Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce rain sensor performance.
● The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
●
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is
stationary and the outside temperature is below
32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the
windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
outside temperature rises above freezing.
40 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
will not operate when the ignition is ON, when
the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL
position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
●
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the
vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can
resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the
lever is pushed while on the intermittent
setting, the wiper will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the
off position, the wiper will operate several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display Automatic Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
● If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
● If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice
on the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
● If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed
if needed.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button
on the touchscreen, or press the button
on the faceplate, to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside
air. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
the AUTO button on the touchscreen, or
push the button on the faceplate. AUTO
will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C)
may be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended for
efficiency. You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
● Press and release this button on the touchscreen
● Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button
on the touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this
function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost
mode is turned off the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control
button on the touchscreen or push and
release the button on the faceplate to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The temperature can also be adjusted by pressing the
Temperature readout on the top left and right corners
of the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the
front and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or
rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
●
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
●
Touchscreen: Blower speed can be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Press the desired blower speed from 1-7.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen or push and release the button
on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system allows for adjustment of the rear climate
controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
● Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen
to display the rear climate controls. Control functions
now operate the rear system.
● To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the Front Climate or Done button on
the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-in
Display Rear Control Screen
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release the Rear button to access
the rear climate controls. The indicator will
illuminate when the rear climate controls
are on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, within the Rear screen, to
change the current setting. The REAR AUTO
indicator will illuminate when REAR AUTO is
on. This feature automatically controls the rear interior
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the rear
system to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release the Front button to
change the display on the Uconnect system
back to the Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the front occupants with the
ability to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature will move up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/
off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature
settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower
settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from
both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release the OFF button to turn
the Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system
has floor air outlets underneath the passengers’ seats,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air through the
floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the
rear modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your
comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
AUTO BUTTON
The A
UT
O butt
on aut
omatically contr
ols
the int
erior cabin t
em
perature b
y adjusting
distribution and amount of airflo
w
.
Performing this function will cause the
system to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature control
up button to raise the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature control
down button to lower the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set
to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing
the blower control buttons. This allows the
rear seat occupants to control the volume of
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the
two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution mode
for the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead (If
vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
● “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
● “
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
ð
page 230.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the win-
dows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Ad-
just the controls as need-
ed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep win-
dows clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield f
ogging star
ts t
o
occur
, mov
e the contr
ol
to
(Mix Mode).
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Release Handle
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder
, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
(Continued)
WARNING!
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the indentation to open
the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of
the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the
access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted
once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward
to the fully open position.
Drawer Access Button
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
lef
t open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some
models.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Front Seatback Storage
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped) located
in the areas below the load floor, located in front of the
second row seats.
In-Floor Storage Bin
1. To access the storage bins with front seats in
the rearward position, place the lock rod in the
unlocked position so the load floor can fold
upw
ards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
● Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
● Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
● Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
● Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
● Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
a
void damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover.
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
● Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
● Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
(Continued)
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
● In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
● Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed
and latched while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
● Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
a
void damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover.
SEAT STORAGE BIN COVER EMERGENCY
RELEASE LEVER
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover
has an Emergency Release Lever built into the latching
mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened
from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-
dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
USB/AUX CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
vehicle that allow an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port. There are four, fully functional USB
ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard USBs
(Type A). There is also an AUX port located between the
USB ports.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time. A
pop-up will appear and allow you to select the device
transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
por
t and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this
vehicle.
● On the back of the front row seats (if equipped).
● Above the rear cup holder in the third row seats (if
equipped).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Rear Seat USB Charging Port
3rd Row USB Charging Port — If Equipped
3rd Row USB Charging Port — If Equipped
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Different scenarios are provided when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports:
● “A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
● “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
● “Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the de
vice is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key
are powered when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a battery are
connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front power outlet
located at the bottom of the instrument panel, near the
storage tray.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there may also be
a power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The front power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the power outlet
fuse in the Power Distribution Center panel from fuse
location F95A to F95B.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) Front Power Outlet
1
0A (If Equipped)
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Only de
vices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
● If this outlet is misused, it may cause an electric
shock.
CAUTION!
● Man
y accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
● Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
● After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must
be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
● Misuse of the outlet could result in malfunction or
the outlet becoming inoperable.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
Power Window Lockout Switch
The window switches will operate only when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in
the OFF position, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors.
The controls will operate only when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory
delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has activated
the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window
Control (Left Side Shown)
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping
several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch past the first detent, release, and the window
will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
52 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO UP
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the control up
for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely and
continue to hold the control down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof/Power Sliding Top (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
HOOD
OPENING
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be
released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is
located behind the center front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of
the hood.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
NOTE:
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmission must
be in PARK.
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and
reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30
cm) from the engine compartment and drop it.
Make sure that the hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
v
ehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
t
o close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure
hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive
vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
● Key fob
● Outside handle
● Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If
the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the
outside handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate.
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
NOTE:
When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors
and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion.
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
● If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
● Overhead console liftgate button
● Key fob
● Outside handle (open or reset liftgate latch)
● Rear interior power liftgate switch on the upper left
trim (when liftgate is open)
54 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using the previous ways to open or close the liftgate:
● When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
● When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
● When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If
the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the
touch pad on the outside handle will unlock and open
the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
NOTE:
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed
with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on
or off in Uconnect Settings
ð
page 100.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
NOTE:
If the power liftgate will not fully open or latch close,
check the latch for damage or obstacles that may
be preventing the closing operation. If the problem
persists, proceed as follows:
1. Press the electronic liftgate release handle on the
outside of the liftgate to home/reset the latch
mechanism.
2. Manually close the liftgate by pulling downward
using the closing handle.
3. Resume normal power liftgate open or closing
operation.
If the home/reset procedure is unsuccessful, see an
authorized dealer f
or service.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft (1.2 x
2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be
moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the instrument cluster.
1. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
● When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster display
messages
ð
page 58.
3. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
3
4. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The gauge can indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats
ð
page 192.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reaches “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the gauge drops
back into the normal range and is no longer
red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
● The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate for a bulb
check when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles or kilometers in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed
to display important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument
cluster display can show you how systems are working
and give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and
enter the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION
AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with an
instrument cluster display (base or premium cluster),
which offers useful information to the driver.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
The instrument cluster display controls allows the driver
to select information by pushing the directional buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
● Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
●
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
●
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Push and release the
down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
●
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
STOP SAFELY VEHICLE WILL SHUT OFF SOON
Stop Safely Vehicle Will
Shut Off Soon Warning Message
This warning will appear on the instrument panel
display when the vehicle has determined an operational
issue will occur shortly, which will cause the vehicle's
propulsion system to turn off. This message will display
along with dashes for the gas engine range and EV
range will continue to show range value. If this message
appears while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location
as soon as possible. Have the vehicle transported to an
authorized dealer.
Another urgent message may appear if the gas engine
is una
vailable and EV range is limited, to indicate the
vehicle will shut off in less than two minutes.
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off
In Less Than Two Minutes Message
● These are high priority messages
● These messages will display continuously
● Cannot be cleared with button press
● A single chime will sound
OIL LIFE RESET
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the instrument cluster.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display for approximately five seconds
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 59
3
● Down Arrow Button
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate it
is time to change the engine oil. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
● Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
● To reset the oil change indicator after performing
the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following
procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Resetting oil
life other than when associated with a scheduled
maintenance may result in damage due to not properly
maintaining the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
3. Push and release the down
arrow button to
access the ”
V
ehicle Inf
o” menu screen.
4.
Push the
lef
t arrow button or right arrow
button to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the
OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%.
6. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu
is reached
ð
page 58.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in
the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up
or do
wn
arrow button
until Speedome
t
er is highlight
ed in the instrument
clust
er displa
y
. Push and release the
OK
butt
on t
o
t
oggle be
tween MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the
left or right
arr
ow button to scroll
thr
ough the f
ollowing inf
ormation submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the icon.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the icon with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset
ð
page 131.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
60 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The
“Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met
in order to reset Oil Life:
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the
OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to
100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message
will display for five seconds, describing the required
conditions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display
ð
page 82.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will
display the following:
● Two submenu pages that can be toggled between
using the
left and right arrow buttons; one with
Current Value displayed and one without the Current
Value displayed:
○ Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
○ Range To Empty (miles or km)
○ Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
○ The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
● Hold
OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the
left or right arrow button
to scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The
Trip information will display the following:
● Distance
● Average Fuel Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display.
Messages
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the
right arrow button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the system
and/or the conditions that need to be met. Messages
remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or do
wn
arrow button
until the Screen Se
tup Menu displa
ys in the instrument
clust
er displa
y. Push and release the
OK
butt
on t
o ent
er
the submenus. The Screen Setup f
eature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter
the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
3
Oil Life
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Time Range
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Center
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Range Time
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title Digital Speed
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Lower Left or Lower Right
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Upper Center
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Audio/Phone Digital Speed Menu Title
Odometer
● Show
Hide
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE
MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take
place to extend the driving time and distance of the
vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off
non-essential 12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction
will be functional when the vehicle propulsion system is
active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on the
High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or
temperature. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
62 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
ð
page 64
.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
● Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
● 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
t
owing, frequent stopping).
● Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if an
y aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
● Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in
all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
warning/indicator lights will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based
upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some warning/indicator lights are optional and may not
appear.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
3
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed. This
indicator will reflect which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
ð
page 80.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service
ð
page 185.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
ð
page 134
.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
3
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
a high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster,
with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated.
It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II
that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park
over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on,
and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low
Fuel Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Service Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the AEB Warning System. Contact
an authorized dealer for service
ð
page
129
.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service
ð
page
81
.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
3
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure light when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure light illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
light. When the system detects a malfunction, the
light will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction light after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
ð
page 82.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
ð
page 81.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
ð
page
82
.
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Cruise
Control.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. When these
systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
● Pr
olonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be performed.
● If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related
to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
inf
ormation to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
ð
page 100.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
● If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
3
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and
is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD
II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD
II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or
a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
● The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
● The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can
fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
(N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting
to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to
an ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF, ACC,
and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and to use the accessories, follow
these steps:
● Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
● Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
● Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position
(instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
● Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
ð
page 58
.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK under certain situations.
It is a back-up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Driv
er inattention could lead to failure to place the
v
ehicle in P
ARK. AL
W
A
Y
S DO A VISU
AL CHECK that
y
our v
ehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
4
WARNING!
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. If the
"P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
● AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts
to turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met,
the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the
vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The gear
selector will automatically reset itself to the PARK
position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF
position (engine off). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark
Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
v
ehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions
are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting
the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The
Electric Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate
in some conditions
ð
page 77.
NOTE:
The engine will remain running.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “
A
utoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
(Continued)
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
f
ollowing precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Bef
ore shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may Park.
PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P”
will display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position
indicator will blink continuously until the gear selector
is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission
will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the previously listed
conditions are met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING!
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition to the START position and
release it when the engine starts. For Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ ignition systems, press and hold
the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/
STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,
then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
4
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an Extended Park condition as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel
in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure
WARNING!
● Ne
ver pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
● Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
● If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
ð
page 182.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW –
22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds
or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine
not running) position and the transmission is in PARK,
the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes
of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended. For ambient
temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block
heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. See the
following steps to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the
passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it
into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to
the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it away
behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
74 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
● The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from an authorized dealer.
● The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
● The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cor
d before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-
in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
ð
page 194
.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
● Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
● Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
ð
page 100
.
The EPB is located in the integrated center stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, push the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once
the parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal
while you apply the parking brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is
OFF, however, it can only be released when the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed into PARK. Once the parking
brake is engaged, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch
will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you
STARTING AND OPERATING 75
4
may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement
while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the
transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver
seat belt is buckled and an attempt is made to drive the
vehicle away by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages.
You may also notice a small amount of movement
in the brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully
disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
● Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
● Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to
slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the
brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, push on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The Brake Warning Light will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought
to a complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the
parking brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the EPB system
is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the customer
programmable features
ð
page 100.
76 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking brake
automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the
automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt
is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is
at a standstill, and there is no attempt to press the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the parking brake
will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from
rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB while the driver door is open and brake pedal
is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be
enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20
km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake (EPB)
system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering Brake Service Mode in your vehicle
ð
page 100. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
● The vehicle must be at a standstill.
● The parking brake must be unapplied.
● The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Brake Service Mode, the EPB Warning Light
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
● Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
● Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
● Apply the EPB.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
4
WARNING!
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
f
ollowing precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission will not come out of Park in
ACC position with the engine off. Ensure that the
transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not
in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes
are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the
engine must be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the
LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to
a lower gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission
gear range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on
the gear selector and then rotate it, to access the
L position. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple
gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply
rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This
is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do no
t press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
● Apply the par
king brake.
● Shift the transmission into PARK.
● Turn the ignition off.
● Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
● DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if
you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
If Recreational Towing
ð
page 97.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle
ð
page 187.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all forward
gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may modify
the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
4
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light will illuminate,
a warning message will appear in the instrument
cluster, and the transmission may operate differently
until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or
NINTH gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm
ð
page 80. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending
very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will
downshift for increased engine braking. To access the
LOW position, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may
remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on your
vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages
automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result
in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch
automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when the vehicle is cold. This
is normal. The torque converter clutch will function
normally once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation system. This system is designed to
address exhaust and engine noise. The system relies
on four microphones embedded in the headliner,
which monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists
an onboard frequency generator, which creates
counteracting sound waves in the audio system’s
speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and
during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system adapts to
different driving conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed
on the instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over
temperature condition in the power steering system.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off
ð
page 63.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" or
"POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken
to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance
ð
page 64.
NOTE:
● Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
● The power steering system is fully electric; it requires
no power steering fluid.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to save fuel and
reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
shifting out of DRIVE will automatically restart the
engine.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must
Occur:
● The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section
ð
page 68
.
● The vehicle must be completely stopped.
● The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move
to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will
illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer
settings will be maintained throughout the Auto Stop/
Start process.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and
ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in
the instrument cluster display Stop/Start screen. In the
following situations the engine will not stop:
● If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/Start
OFF button.
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Driver’s door is not closed.
● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
● Battery charge is low. During this time a message
will display "Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging".
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
● HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
● Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
● The transmission is not in a forward gear.
● Hood is open.
● Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
● Accelerator pedal input.
● Engine temperature is too high.
● 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items previously listed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
4
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTO
STOP/START
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:
● The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
● To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
● Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready Battery
Charging".
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
● Steering angle beyond threshold.
TO MANU
ALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode will
be disabled
ð
page 63.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
position every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the Stop/
Start OFF switch again (located on the switch bank).
The light on the switch will turn off.
SY
STEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A “Service
STOP/START System” message and a yellow Stop/Start
telltale will appear in the instrument cluster display
ð
page 58
.
If the “Service STOP/START System” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system for cruising at a constant preset speed.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
canno
t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
The Cruise Control Set Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. The Cruise
Control Set Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator
to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
4
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and
released when performing a parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
● The driver can override the automatic braking
function by pressing the gas pedal, turning
ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing the
gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is not available.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
● The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
● The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
● The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
● ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for
controlling the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations/
precautions, see
ð
page 87.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear
selector position, the system will remain active until
the v
ehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear within
the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle
speed is too fast. The system will become active again
if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in
the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed
if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
system
ð
page 100.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
ð
page 58. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle
has been detected, the warning display will turn on
indicating the system status, and remain on until the
vehicle is moved out of REVERSE.
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in
the left and/or right rear region and will produce a
fast tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
4
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 79 in-
ches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches (65-30
cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center
only
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only
Fast
(for rear center
only
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “ParkSense Off” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the “ParkSense Off” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once
per ignition cycle, and it will display the “ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensor” or the “ParkSense
Unavailable Service Required”. When the gear selector
is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
ð
page 58 will show the "ParkSense Unavailable
Wipe Rear Sensor" or "ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" message for five seconds while the vehicle is
in REVERSE. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If “ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensor” appears
in the instrument cluster display, make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other
obstructions and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” appears
in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized
dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
● Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the ParkSense
system operating properly.
● Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “ParkSense Off”. Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
● When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show “ParkSense Off” for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
● ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
blockage or sensor problem, causing the “ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensor” message to be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
(Continued)
WARNING!
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
4
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
It uses a forward facing camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the
form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well
as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the instrument
cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel
if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push
the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
● When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
Telltale
is solid white only when the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready
to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the left side.
● When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the visual warning in the instrument
cluster display will show the left inside lane line
flashing yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line
on the left of the display will remain solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Approached With Flashing
Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure when only the right lane
marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
● When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
● When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift With Solid
Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
● When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/
off) while the left outside line remains solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached With Flashing
Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
4
NOTE:
● When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
● The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
● The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the
rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
ð
page 100.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
A t
ouchscreen X button to disable the camera image
is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE
gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of
REVERSE can be disabled through the camera settings
menu with the Uconnect system.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seal the system.
WARNING!
● Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● Ne
ver add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (3
o'clock position) and release to open. Rotate to full
open position.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear
edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and
then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice
buildup.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)
number is included on this label and indicates the
Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in
the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
4
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately to
be sure that the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably
do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
ð
page 91.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
ð
page 91.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
fr
ont or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle
and trailer stability. TSC and a Weight-Distributing
(load equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier
TW and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
● An im
properly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
● Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard
for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
class can tow and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Indus-
try Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Du-
ty
10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
4
Engine/Transmission Trailer Tow Package GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard.
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the
vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
● Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of
vehicle, full fluids, no occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
● For calculation purposes, average weight of an
occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
● GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)
● CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
● Load Capacity = G
VWR – CURB = 6,005 lb (2,723
kg) - 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb (682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
● 1,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb [68
kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3,600 lb [1,632 kg])
= 545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb
(163 kg)
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg)
1,205 lb
(546 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) = 845
lb (383 kg)
845 lb
(383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg)
955 lb
(433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) – 360
lb (163 kg) = 545 lb
(247 kg)
545 lb
(247 kg)
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb
(163 kg)
7 people / 1,050 lb (476 kg)
455 lb
(206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) – 360
lb (163 kg) = 95 lb (43
kg)
95 lb
(43 kg)
● Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or
rear axles.
● GAWR is found on the certification label affixed to
the driver’s side door jamb.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
● The tongue weight of the trailer.
● The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
● The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle
ð
page 220.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the ne
w v
ehicle is driv
en. The engine,
axle or o
ther par
ts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Then, during the f
irst 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in “Scheduled
Servicing”
ð
page 189. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
● Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
4
WARNING!
● When hauling cargo or t
owing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
● Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
● Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block
or "chock" the trailer wheels.
● GCWR must not be exceeded.
●
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
● Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
● Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
● Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
● Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
● Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
● Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
● For further information
ð
page 216.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
● Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
● An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
● Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
● Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
(Continued)
WARNING!
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
● Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
● Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
● Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on
steep downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
● Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
● When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
● Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheel OFF The
Ground
FWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
● To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB)
engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park
Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
(if rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto
Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the
customer programmable features
ð
page 100.
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
4
● When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
● If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, for further information
ð
page
187
.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
CAUTION!
● DO NO
T flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
● Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains
released, while being towed.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the
previously listed requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do
not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
● Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
● Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
● Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
● Keep tires properly inflated.
● Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
98 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path's
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Warnings
and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
● Driving thr
ough standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
● Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
● Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
● Alw
ays check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
● Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
● Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
● Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
● Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
ð
page 238, or refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
● As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located on the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can vary by
vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the contr
ol knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the
radio.
100 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab at the top of the touchscreen. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to
the screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode
The setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
MULTIMEDIA 101
5
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options
are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100
km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, and
“Taller”.
102 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 103
5
Setting Name Description
Navigation Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will allow you to customize the settings within Navigation Mode.
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
104 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options
are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
MULTIMEDIA 105
5
Setting Name Description
Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100
km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
106 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Sub-
menu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is
in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the
FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have
the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting
will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible
chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide
an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system “Off” or to “Warning &
Active Braking”.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected.
The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected.
The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual
display when an object is detected.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is
running, or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a
message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
MULTIMEDIA 107
5
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to manually set the time of your clock.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date by day, month, and year (DD/MM/YY).
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
108 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the Do Not Disturb Settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Voice — If Equipped
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 109
5
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-In This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival” is calculated, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
110 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 111
5
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
112 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
MULTIMEDIA 113
5
Setting Name Description
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or sense an
obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening. Selectable options
are “On” and “Off”.
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated
or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
114 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 115
5
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”,
“1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio This setting will automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall
whether it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The selectable options are “On”, “Off”,
and “Recall Last”.
Volume Adjustment This setting allows you to adjust the volume levels for features such as Media, Phone,
Navigation, and Voice Recognition.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
116 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Popups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns navigation pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles & Settings This setting will allow you to view your SiriusXM® account information, profiles linked
to the system, and the various settings you have saved and stored to those profiles.
Block Explicit This setting will allow you to block explicit content by turning it on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 117
5
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display information on updating the Uconnect system’s software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for
the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
118 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
Restart Radio This setting will restart the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password for Projection This setting will reset your Wi-Fi password for projection.
Factory Reset This setting will factory reset the radio. It may cause the radio to restart multiple times
and the backup camera, radio, SOS, and several driving assistance features will not
be available. Once the system resets, you will need to turn the vehicle off then back on
to complete the process.
MULTIMEDIA 119
5
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button makes
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERA
TION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
ð
page 241.
120 MULTIMEDIA
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
● Brake pedal pulsations
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticat
ed electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual
and auditory notification. When the system is activated,
it displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory
alert upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF
position to exit the vehicle. The system will activate
automatically if a rear door is opened within 10 minutes
of the ignition being placed in the ON/RUN position.
RSRA should be used as a reminder to check the rear
seats; it does not directly detect objects, passengers, or
SAFETY 121
6
pets and is only activated when the previous conditions
are met.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
ð
page 100.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control
System (TCS).These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain
Brake Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC
module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that
the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the
driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active is the
torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque.
It is very important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible
for steering the vehicle.
122 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done
to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel
lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,
striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist
in counteracting these conditions. Engine power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electr
onic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
SAFETY 123
6
WARNING!
● When in “P
artial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
(Continued)
WARNING!
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
● Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
124 SAFETY
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be
in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable
to allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by
momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter
partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
ð
page 100.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
● If y
ou use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
● HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction
is required.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The T
CS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC
cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
ð
page 92.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
SAFETY 125
6
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is
in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monit
ors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
● The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
● The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may
result in false detections. The BSM Warning Light
may even remain illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear
ð
page 100.
● The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side
mirror warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or
any small object remains at the side of the vehicle
for extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminants accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle
is operated in areas with extremely low radar returns
such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
If blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will display
in the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and
BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically recover and
resume function when the condition clear
s. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminants.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
ð
page 128.
126 SAFET
Y
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This
is normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
SAFETY 127
6
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
ð
page 241.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
t
o help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if
your vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the
system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the
opposite direction.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in
the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
128 SAFETY
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings and limited braking are intended to provide
the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate
the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force,
the system will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning
with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. If a pedestrian is
encountered in the path at the same speed threshold,
the system will also attempt to bring the vehicle to a
stop.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
ð
page 241.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2
km/h).
● The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
SAFETY 129
6
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect Settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be available
in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
ð
page
100
.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when
the latter is at a farther distance than the “Medium”
setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium”
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
● Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking,
or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
● Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
● FCW will be disabled with the unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present,
the system will return to its full performance state. If
the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
● FCW Unavailable Service Required
● Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
130 SAFET
Y
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Equipped
The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a
subsystem of the FCW system that provides the driver
with audible and visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display, and may apply automatic braking when
it detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph (60
km/h), the system may provide braking to mitigate
the potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the
PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes. When the system determines
a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you
is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
ð
page 100.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. The system
will reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
SAFETY 131
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color, or the
Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message. When this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See
ð
page 216 for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off.
6
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving
the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value
ð
page 241.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized f
or the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
(Continued)
CAUTION!
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
● After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
W
arning Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and
to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
● Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
● Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
132 SAFET
Y
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
● Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
● Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
● Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
● Using tire chains on the vehicle
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the “Inflate to XX”
message will continue to be displayed. Upon the
next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will
remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a
different color pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will displa
y a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place
of the compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument
cluster will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate
to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value
as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies
that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then,
SAFETY 133
6
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will
no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
ma
y be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
ð
page
151
.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
ð
page 151
.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
ð
page 238 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
134 SAFETY
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
SAFETY 135
6
WARNING!
● Do no
t allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt w
orn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
(Continued)
WARNING!
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
(Continued)
WARNING!
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
136 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push
or squeeze the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
SAFETY 137
6
WARNING!
● W
earing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And
Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row
center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch
plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach
from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the headliner for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the headliner
slightly behind the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left
head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch Plate To Mini-Buckle
138 SAFETY
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The
seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
into its stowed position.
Insert Regular Latch Plate
Into Mini-Buckle Slot To Detach
WARNING!
● If the mini-latch plat
e and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
● When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch
plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
(Continued)
SAFETY 139
6
WARNING!
● Using a Seat Belt Ext
ender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The fr
ont outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system
ð
page 159.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Seven Passenger Bench Seat
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Seven Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
140 SAFETY
Eight Passenger Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
(Continued)
WARNING!
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a
park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate
over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt
and install the car seat normally. When the car seat is
removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above
the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seat
belt securely.
SAFETY 141
6
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the
lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold
the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third
row seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip
while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the
webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain
an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain
an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned
properly on the occupant and they could be more
seriously injured in an accident as a result.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● F
ront and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
142 SAFETY
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean y
ou won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
ð
page 64.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
● Being t
oo close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
SAFETY 143
6
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed o
ver or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it
takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
● Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor.
The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine
the front passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
144 SAFETY
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
● The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a f
orward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint
system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
● Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where
that weight is located. The OCS communicates the
classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification to determine whether the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
SAFETY 145
6
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is different
fr
om the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
146 SAFETY
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● U
napproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly, its related
components, seat cover or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
(Continued)
WARNING!
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
● Do no
t drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
SAFETY 147
6
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deplo
ys, it opens the seam on the
outboar
d side of the seatback’s trim co
v
er
. The inflating
SAB deplo
ys thr
ough the seat seam int
o the space
be
tw
een the occupant and the door
. The SAB moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflat
es. Children are at an e
v
en great
er risk of injur
y
fr
om a deplo
ying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
po
tential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
● Do no
t mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
148 SAFETY
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or v
ery close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING!
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need r
oom to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
SAFETY 149
6
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might get
sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are
not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manuf
acturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will
determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
● Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
● Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
● Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
● Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, place the ignition in the STOP (OFF)
position to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
150 SAFET
Y
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
● Modif
ications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the cir
cumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
SAFETY 151
6
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
● For additional information, refer to
http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1-888-327-4236.
● Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
https://tc.canada.ca/en/
road-transportation/child-car-seat-safety
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
no
t reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
152 SAFETY
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints
can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant
carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach
the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle
is not designed to manage the crash forces of this
type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may
not function as it was designed by the car seat
manufacturer, and your child may be more severely
injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing
direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
● When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
SAFETY 153
6
Infant And Child Restraints
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child
Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether An-
chor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
154 SAFETY
WARNING!
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install
the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
R
estraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (Two Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Seven Passenger Stow ‘n
Go Seating LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (Two Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (Two Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 155
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint? 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center
head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be re-
moved if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not re-
movable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable
in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints
are not removable
ð
page 33.
156 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages
Shown) Seven Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row
Anchorages Shown) Eight Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown) Seven Passenger Bench Seating
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind all second row seating positions. The
third row has a tether anchor on the 40%
seat for the right outboard position and in
the center of the 60% seat for either the center or
left outboard seating position. All tether anchorages are
located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
SAFETY 157
6
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second
Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Seven
Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second
Row Eight Passenger Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third
Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten
the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the
right outboard position behind the front passenger (1).
Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not
have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position
in your vehicle.
Third Row Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard
position, do not use that outboard position. If a child
seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH
anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
158 SAFET
Y
WARNING!
● Use anchorages C and D t
o install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
● Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please see
ð
page 159
for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions below. See
ð
page 159
to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat
can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for
the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
ð
page 163 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
SAFETY 159
6
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
ð
page 140
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger Bench Seat
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Seven Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
160 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat? Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center
head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be re-
moved if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not re-
movable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable
in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints
are not removable
ð
page 33.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is t
o be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
SAFETY 161
6
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
ð
page 163
for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a
park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over
the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and
install the car seat following the steps above. When the
car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch
plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch
the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features
of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature.
Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as
described in the steps above or move the car seat to a
different seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
162 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See
ð
page 155 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Second Row Tether Attachment
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat
forward to provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
Top Tether Anchorage
Locations — 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations
— 2nd Row Eight Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Location — 2nd Row
Seven Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint
and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
SAFETY 163
6
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 3rd Row
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60%
seat in the third row may be used by either the left
outboard or the center seating position. Only tether one
child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the 60% third
row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the
child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center
head restraint and route the tether strap around
the inboard (left) side of the head restraint support
posts, as shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one
child restraint t
o the tether anchorage on the 60%
seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for
one child restraint at a time.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
(Continued)
164 SAFETY
WARNING!
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPOR
TING PETS
Air Bags deplo
ying in the fr
ont seat could harm y
our
pet. An unrestrained pe
t will be thr
own about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pe
ts should be restrained in the rear seat (if eq
uipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be ensured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
ð
page 69.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
(Continued)
WARNING!
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
ð
page 134.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
(Continued)
SAFETY 165
6
WARNING!
● AL
WAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the engine off,
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
(Continued)
WARNING!
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
● It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
● Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
● If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
166 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer
inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent
body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such
as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
(Continued)
WARNING!
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until
repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
SAFETY 167
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With e
xtended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
r
oad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
(Continued)
WARNING!
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
ð
page 241.
● The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
Chrysler Connect™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
168 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the SOS and Assist
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green
once a connection to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
● The vehicle brand
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the r
oad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
● Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator,
the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to determine
if additional assistance is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If an
yone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
(Continued)
WARNING!
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
● The Rearview Mirror light located between the SOS
and Assist buttons will continuously illuminate red.
● The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
● An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 169
7
WARNING!
● Ignoring the R
earview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
● The ignition is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable
or obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s air bags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIS
T button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
● Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will
be connected to a representative for assistance.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle is being
driven and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside assistance.
● Chrysler Connect™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for Chrysler Connect™.
● Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
● Uconnect Customer Care – Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spra
y any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
(Continued)
170 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
● Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
● The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice
or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped)
are stowed behind an access panel on the left hand
side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 171
7
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut
that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently
remove it from the storage area. Remove wrench
from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
count
er
clockwise t
o collapse fr
om st
orage area
that is locat
ed behind the tire.
Jack Location
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
pre
vent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
● Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
● Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
● Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
(Continued)
172 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
● Do no
t get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
● Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
● If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations o
ther than those indicat
ed in the Jacking
Instructions f
or this v
ehicle.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each
side of the vehicle body. These locations are on
the sill flange of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper
jacking locations.
Jack Locations
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The v
ehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Front Lifting Point
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 173
7
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations o
ther than those indicated.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly engaged
in the described location. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
mak
e the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand.
Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel
off the hub.
174 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the v
alve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating
the inflatable spare after the tire has been
mounted to the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the
hub by tightening the nuts with the wrench. After
inflation, once the vehicle is lowered you will have
a second opportunity to “torque” the lug nuts
ð
page 233
.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor
ð
page 176
or Tire Service Kit if equipped
ð
page
177
.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has
reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has
been removed from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice
ð
page 233. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or har
d stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and
the spare tire in the places provided. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do no
t st
o
w the
deflat
ed tire in the inflatable spare tire location.
Hav
e the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as
soon as possible.
1
3.
St
o
w the jack back in the st
o
w
age compartment
and place the access panel back. The stud of
the storage area must be threaded through the
lower part of the jack. Then turn the Jack Screw
clockwise to secure it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 175
7
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels
with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the
mounting studs which are on each side of the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the
cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush
onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will
have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is
lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel
under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause
vibration, and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. Details for proper wheel lug nut torque
ð
page 233
. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located
in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the
inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare
Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the
storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the
Jacking Instructions within this section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is located near
the ground, and then screw the air hose of the
Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem.
176 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it
the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before turning
ON the Portable Air Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pressure
indicated on the Tire and Loading information label
located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in
the Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label sticker
from the Portable Air Compressor and
place it on the center of the steering
wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam
tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam
tray in the cargo area.
WARNING!
● Do no
t lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the hose.
● Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in
the provided place.
● The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
● Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat source.
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit
or Portable Air Compressor
ð
page 176 and
push the deflation button to do this step. See
the Portable Air Compressor in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare tire will
return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the Tire Service Kit.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed
from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside
temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This
kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
Depending on the vehicle trim level, the Tire Service Kit
storage may vary.
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is
stored in the storage bin located behind the rear cargo
trim panel.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 177
7
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit
1 — Tire Service Kit
2 — Fuel Funnel
Depending on the vehicle trim level, the Tire Service Kit
st
orage may vary.
Tire Service Kit Location — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is
stored under the load floor within the second row.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
●
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
●
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
●
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
●
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
overinflated.
178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
● Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior
to the expiration date (printed at the lower right
hand corner on the bottle label) to ensure optimum
operation of the system. See the Sealant Bottle
Replacement in this section for further information.
● The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
● When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be
peeled off and properly discarded.
● For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
● The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
● The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
● You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob
is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
● Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
● Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
● Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
● A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
● Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if
inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin.
(Continued)
WARNING!
It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
● Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex.
In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a
physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 179
7
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant
Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the vehicle is running before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing through
hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8
Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Sealant
Bottle is empty. Continue to operate
the pump and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the driver-side
door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at
the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
● The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on
the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in
the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8
km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
180 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
After Driving:
● Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into
the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
● Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
● Apply the parking brake.
If tire has improper inflation, see the following the
steps.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
gr
ound next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting
at the end of the hose onto the valve
stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label
located in the driver-side door opening.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area
in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 181
7
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressureto the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
● For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
● The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
● R
eplace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to
ensure optimum operation of the system.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
CAUTION!
Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly.
Have them disposed of in compliance with national
and local regulations.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and place the ignition
to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach,
set the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the discharge
vehicle) near the windshield cowl.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 183
7
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery and reinstall
the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
dra
w power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF
EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a capless fuel system
ð
page 171. If emergency
refueling is necessary, use an approved gas can and
insert the refueling funnel into the filler pipe opening.
Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid
spills.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup. Then push on the rear
center edge of the fuel door to re-release. Do not pry on
the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
184 IN CASE OF EMER
GENCY
2. Insert funnel into the fuel filler pipe opening.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
● Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
● Strong smell of coolant
● Whit
e smoke coming from engine or exhaust
● Coolant bo
ttle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
● On highways — slow down.
● In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
● Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
● Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
v
ehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain
control of the vehicle before activating the Manual
Park Release. If possible, you should apply the
parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
or properly connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission
will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 185
7
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove
the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to
the lower left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether
strap out as far as it will go, then release it.
The transmission should now be in NEUTRAL (N),
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
reinstall the access cover. If the access cover
cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If y
our vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
ð
page 123. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
(Continued)
186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
● Racing the engine or spinning the wheels ma
y
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
● Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheel OFF The
Ground
ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front
ACCEPTABLE
METHOD
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
● You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels
are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric
Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
● Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle
onto a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located
on the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attachment
points.
● This recovery tow feature should be used by a
trained professional only.
● Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 187
7
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
● Is t
o be used by a professional ONLY.
● Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
● Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
● Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
● Be applied at constant speed.
● Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
● Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver's
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle
ð
page 185.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
● Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS
)
This v
ehicle is eq
uipped with an Enhanced A
ccident
R
esponse Syst
em.
This f
eature is a communication ne
tw
ork that tak
es
effect in the event of an impact
ð
page 150.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This v
ehicle is eq
uipped with an e
v
ent data recor
der
(EDR). The main pur
pose of an EDR is t
o recor
d
data that will assist in under
standing how a v
ehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle
ð
page 151.
188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This means
that service is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow,
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer
ð
page 58.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
● Check engine oil level
● Check the operation of the interior and exterior lights
● Check the 12V battery terminals, cables and
connections
● Check the brake pads, rotors, brake operation and
fluid level
● Check the steering, suspension, chassis
components and axle boots
● Check the wiper and washer operation, wiper blades
and reservoir
● Check the coolant fluid reservoir(s)
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required
maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Change oil and f
ilter.
● Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
● Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
● Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
● Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 189
8
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Inspect exhaust system.
● Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if
necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(2
40,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
WARNING!
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● F
ailure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
(Continued)
WARNING!
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
1
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 191
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Battery
192 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
● Crosshatched zone.
● Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
● Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
● Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
y
our engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
● Batt
ery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
(Continued)
WARNING!
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water
ð
page 182
.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
● It is essential when replacing the cables on the
batt
er
y that the positiv
e cable is attached t
o the
positiv
e post and the negative cable is attached
t
o the negativ
e post. Battery posts are mar
ked
positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on
the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 193
8
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform
all service operations in an expert manner. Service
Manuals are available which include detailed service
information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
ð
page 236
.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 189.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case
of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
(Continued)
194 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Do not start the engine or have the engine running
while performaning these steps.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Discconnect the vapor hose by pushing down on
the clip and pulling outward.
2. Loosen the clamp on the air intake hose.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fastener
2 — Clamp
3 — Vapor Hose
4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on the
engine air cleaner, filter cover.
4. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover and pull the
cover forward until the locating tabs are free from
the rear of the filter assembly.
5. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly only if
significant dirt or debris is present before replacing the
engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly and pushing the cover into the
locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
4. Tighten the air intake hose clamp.
5. Reconnect the vapor hose into the housing
assembly.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured
by the moving fan blades.
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 195
8
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across the ribbed surface of a belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along
a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks
running along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the
belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or
severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
● Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
● Rib or belt wear
● Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
● Belt slips
● Gr
oove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
● Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
● Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use
of special tools; we recommend having your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
(Continued)
WARNING!
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
located online, for further warranty information.
● The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–
1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-warming potential.
It is recommended that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving
extra slack on the glove compartment tension
tether. Detach the glove compartment tension
tether by sliding the black tension tether clip down,
and popping it out of the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
either side of the glove compartment door. To
release them, push inward on each travel stop,
and pull the glove compartment door down until
the travel stops pass clear of their hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment
snap, and detach it from the rest of the snap.
There is a small space on the side of each snap
to use for separating the lid from the snap. Once
detached, remove the rest of the snap completely
from the compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment
cover to gain access to the fresh air inlet.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the
retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then
pulling the filter cover out to expose the cabin air
filter. Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover,
making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured
into their housings.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 197
8
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and
reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap
lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the
near closed position to reengage the glove
compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the glove
compartment tension tether clip down and slide
it back into the slot on the side of the glove
compartment door.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
● Wear or uneven edges
● Foreign material
● Hardening or cracking
● Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
ma
y be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up
position.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and
while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide
the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper
blade from the wiper arm with the other hand
(move the wiper blade toward the right side of the
vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip
of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open
and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away
from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush
against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch
engagement will be accompanied by an audible
click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1
.
Lif
t the rear wiper arm piv
ot cap a
w
a
y fr
om the
glass to allo
w the rear wiper blade t
o be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
8
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest
to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left
hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far
enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from
the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the
glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
● Exhaust gases can injure or kill. The
y contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO,
ð
page 164 for further information.
● A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such as grass or
leaves, and those items come into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
● The catalytic con
verter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause
the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs,
stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to
cool. Service, including a tune-up to the manufacturer
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
● Do no
t interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or t
owing
the vehicle.
● Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
● You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
● Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition is
in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 189.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 201
8
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
ð
page 236.
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up t
o ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period,
it is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When
adding engine coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed t
o be added to the system, please contact
an authorized dealer.
● Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do no
t open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
202 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SY
STEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 189.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately
if the Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on
the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
ð
page 237
.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 203
8
WARNING!
● Use only manuf
acturer recommended brake
fluid
ð
page 237. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
● Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid
ð
page 237. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than manufacturer
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
ð
page 237.
204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
● When replacing a blo
wn fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blo
wn fuse)
Underhood Fuses
CAUTION!
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
NOTE:
The function and amperage of the following fuses are
different, depending on vehicle trim level and content.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 205
8
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit
breakers and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure
engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at
each side of the PDC cover, avoid using screwdrivers or
any other tool to remove the cover, since they may apply
excessive force and result in a broken/damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F06 – – Not Used
206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/Active Noise Control *
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (S)*
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 207
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25 – 10 Amp Red
Hands-free Door Mod / HRLS / Active Grill
Shutter/ PWR Mirror / VRM
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28 – 10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Port / USB+ (IP) / Video USB
Port / Overhead DVD Player (Aftermarket)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB / PWR Lumbar *
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
208 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof *
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC / Exterior Lights
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – – Not Used
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC / Interior Lights
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 209
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU & Valves
F55 – 15 Amp Blue RF HUB/ KIN / ESL / DVD
F56 – 10 Amp Red
Front & Rear HVAC Control / OCM / ESL /
ESP / ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Mod / Power Transfer
Unit *
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F67 – 10 Amp Red DASM / Parktronic / HALF
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors *
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Back-up Lights *
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / Center Display / Telematics
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment / Media Hub / USB
(S) / Sunroof / RR View Mirror / Overhead
DVD Player / Int Monitoring Camera /
Wireless Charging Pad
F78 – 15 Amp Blue TCM (ZF) / E-Shifter / Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / EPB SW / Strg Column Cntrl
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control MOD *
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats / Heated Steering
Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB IP (Run/ACC)
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP (Direct
B+)
F96 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F97 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake Mod *
F100 – 10 Amp Red
Headlamp Level / RR Camera / Blind-
spot / Humidity Snsr / In Car Temp Snsr /
Headlamp SW *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes + RR
PWR Window Lockout
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers. Some of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-
wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome
Lamp
LED
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Reading
Lamps
LED
Front Door Courtesy
Lamp
LED
Front Header Reading
Lamps – If Equipped
LED
Instrument Cluster
Lamps
LED
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Overhead Console Read-
ing Lamps
LED
Removable Console
Lamp – If Equipped
LED
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Halogen Head Lamp
Reflector Low Beam —
H11LL
Reflector High Beam —
9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED (Serviced at an au-
thorized dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker
Lamp
Rear Tail - Body Side -
W21/5WLL
Rear Tail - Liftgate -
W5WLL
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
into the housing, and rotate the front turn signal
lamp socket clockwise to lock it in place.
FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel
liner and carefully peel back liner for access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp
socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp
assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise to
lock into place.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
8
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install
the three fasteners.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = P
assenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
EXAMPLE:
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diame
ter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
8
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
●
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
●
LL = Light load tire or
●
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicat
es the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 01 means the year 2001
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
8
Term Definition
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard in this manual
ð
page
91
.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing,
ð
page 91.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in
step 4.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Fuel Economy
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● U
nderinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
● Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
● Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Im
proper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
alw
a
ys reinstall the v
alv
e stem cap. This will pre
v
ent
moisture and dirt from ent
ering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
8
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is no
t designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs
when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
the Run Flat mode (14 psi [96 kPa] condition), please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
(Continued)
WARNING!
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced
ð
page 225.
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style.
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven.
● Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
y
ears, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed
ð
page 224
. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
ð
page 216.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
(Continued)
WARNING!
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
● Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Eq
uipped
All season tires pr
o
vide traction f
or all seasons (Spring,
Summer
, A
utumn, and Wint
er). Traction lev
els may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
8
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use
of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires
can be identified by a mountain/snowflake
symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need
snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to
the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
ð
page 177.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
ð
page
187
.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with
the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible
spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on
the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the
driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like
the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed
on your Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
(Continued)
WARNING!
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall
it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
8
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
(Continued)
CAUTION!
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
T
rim Level
Axle
Tire/Wheel
Size
Snow Trac-
tion Device
(Maximum
Projection
Beyond Tire
Profile Or
Equivalent)
LX
SXT
Front
235/
65R17
9 mm Ca-
ble/Chain
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8
km). Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
● Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
● Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
(Continued)
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48
km/h).
● Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all
season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed
ð
page
189
.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The T
readw
ear grade is a com
parativ
e
rating, based on the w
ear rate
of the tire when t
est
ed under
controlled conditions on a specified
go
vernment test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
8
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
● Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
● Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
BODYWORK
PR
OTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
230 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and
fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
● Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
● It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
● If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
● Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
8
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air freshener
s, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use
an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning
the inside rear window equipped with electric
defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through
the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of overall
braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal
travel during application, greater pedal force required
to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
W
arning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb (135
N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 233
9
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque
to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do no
t tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see
a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded regular gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
● Undesirable lean conditions
● OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
● Poor engine performance
● Poor cold start and cold drivability
● Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
234 TECHNICAL SPECIFICA
TIONS
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP)
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE
TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT
reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in
your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives will help
improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain
vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the usage
of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a
higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the
usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com, at the link below, for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel
system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
● The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
● An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
● The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products contain
high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives
is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 235
9
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 gal 71 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 15 qt 14.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full
synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trade-
mark
ð
page 194.
236 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) o
ther
than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
(Continued)
CAUTION!
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need
to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
(Continued)
CAUTION!
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 237
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if
you are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles
on the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated
from the start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as
set forth in your Warranty Information book.
2
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out
of gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or
towing as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-
free: USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869.
Provide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
2
Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc., 400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 02155, except in AK, CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are
provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive, Suite 165, Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
238 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of
the problem and answer a few simple questions. You
will be given the name of the service provider and
an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an
unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your
VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
A claim can also be submitted online at https://
stellantis.roadsidereimbursement.com
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at
any time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, which are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home.
We will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you
to a nearby station. This service is limited to two
occurrences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help
is just a phone call away. This service is limited to
providing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does
not cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance
will dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle
to the closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or
Ram dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you
will be responsible for the cost of the extra distance.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC Customer Service
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 239
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable
protection against repair costs after your vehicle
warranties have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection
plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC
to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's
warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to owners.mopar.ca/en/
for further information.
For French, refer to owners.mopar.ca/fr/ for further
information.
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the warranty information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to
keep it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
240 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/
en/(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
●
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 241
10
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
242 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ...........................................
233
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ................202
Additives, Fuel ..................................................235
Adjust
Down ..............................................................
31
Forward ..........................................................31
Rearward ....................................................... 31
Up ...................................................................31
Air Bag .............................................................. 143
Air Bag Operation ....................................... 144
Air Bag Warning Light ........................142, 144
Driver Knee Air Bag .................................... 147
Enhanced Accident Response ..........150, 188
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ........................188
Front Air Bag ............................................... 144
If Deployment Occurs .................................150
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................147
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ...............151
Maintenance ...............................................151
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 143
Side Air Bags ...............................................148
Transporting Pets ....................................... 165
Air Bag Light ..................................... 64, 142, 165
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................................................................ 194
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........................196
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................. 196
Air Conditioner System ....................................196
Air Conditioning Filter ...................... 46, 195, 197
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 46
Air Filter ............................................................194
Air Pressure ............................................................
Tires .............................................................223
Alarm
Arm The System ............................................16
Disarm The System .......................................16
Security Alarm ...............................................66
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ............................................................. 7
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 121
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................................66
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................... 202, 236
Disposal ...................................................... 203
Assist, Hill Start ............................................... 124
Audio Jack .......................................................... 49
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 100
Auto Up Power Windows ....................................52
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................................ 35
Automatic Headlights ........................................ 37
Automatic Transaxle .......................................... 77
Automatic Transmission .................................... 78
Adding Fluid ....................................... 204, 237
Fluid And Filter Change ..............................204
Fluid Change ...............................................204
Fluid Level Check ....................................... 204
Fluid Type ........................................... 204, 237
Special Additives ........................................ 204
AutoPark ............................................................. 71
AUX Cord .............................................................49
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........50
Axle Lubrication ............................................... 237
B
B-Pillar Location ..............................................
220
Back Up Camera ................................................90
Battery ....................................................... 64, 193
Charging System Light ..................................64
Jump Starting ............................................. 182
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .....................11
Battery Saver Feature ........................................38
Belts, Seat ........................................................165
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................... 126
Body Mechanism Lubrication .........................198
Brake Assist System ........................................122
Brake Control System, Electronic ...................122
Brake Fluid .......................................................237
Brake System ..........................................203, 233
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................................... 233
243
11
Fluid Check ........................................ 203, 237
Master Cylinder .......................................... 203
Parking .......................................................... 75
Warning Light ................................................64
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........................78
Brightness, Interior Lights .................................39
Bulb Replacement .................................. 214, 215
Bulbs, Light .....................................166, 214, 215
C
Camera ...............................................................
90
Camera, Rear .....................................................90
Capacities, Fluid .............................................. 236
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................................................ 90
Oil (Engine) ..................................................192
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...................... 202
Car Washes ......................................................231
Carbon Monoxide Warning .....................166, 167
Cargo
Vehicle Loading .............................................55
Cargo Load Floor ................................................55
Cellular Phone ................................................. 120
Certification Label ..............................................91
Chains, Tire ......................................................228
Change Oil Indicator .......................................... 59
Changing A Flat Tire .........................................170
Chart, Tire Sizing ..............................................216
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ...................................................................69
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 164
Checks, Safety ................................................. 164
Child Restraint ................................................. 151
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................................. 153
Center Seat LATCH ..................................... 158
Child Seat Installation ....................... 160, 161
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....159
Infant And Child Restraints ........................152
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..155
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........153
Seating Positions ........................................154
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ............... 163
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................... 234
Cleaning
Wheels .........................................................227
Climate Control ...................................................41
Automatic ...................................................... 41
Rear ............................................................... 44
Cold Weather Operation .................................... 74
Compact Spare Tire .........................................226
Contract, Service ............................................. 240
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............202
Cooling System ................................................ 201
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................... 202
Coolant Level .............................................. 203
Cooling Capacity .........................................236
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................... 203
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................201
Inspection .......................................... 201, 203
Points To Remember ..................................203
Pressure Cap .............................................. 202
Radiator Cap ...............................................202
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 202, 236
Corrosion Protection ........................................230
Cruise Control .................................................... 82
Cruise Light ..................................................68, 69
Customer Assistance ...................................... 238
Cybersecurity ................................................... 100
D
Daytime Running Lights ....................................
36
Dealer Service ................................................. 194
Defroster, Windshield ......................................165
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............................... 39
Diagnostic System, Onboard .............................69
Dimmer Switch
Headlight .......................................................36
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................................................193
Disable Vehicle Towing ....................................187
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ....................... 203
Door Ajar ......................................................64, 65
Door Ajar Light .............................................64, 65
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ................................ 22, 23
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ............................................. 98
244
E
Electric Brake Control System ........................
122
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 121
Traction Control System ............................. 125
Electric Parking Brake ....................................... 75
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................123
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........65
Emergency Braking ......................................... 131
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ....................... 184
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................168
Jacking ................................................170, 172
Overheating ................................................ 185
Towing ..........................................................187
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 69
Engine .............................................................. 192
Air Cleaner .................................................. 194
Block Heater ..................................................74
Break-In Recommendations ........................ 75
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 193
Compartment ..............................................192
Compartment Identification ...................... 192
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................236
Cooling ........................................................ 201
Exhaust Gas Caution ......................... 166, 167
Fails To Start ..................................................74
Flooded, Starting ...........................................74
Fuel Requirements ..................................... 234
Oil ....................................................... 194, 236
Oil Filler Cap ................................................192
Oil Filter .......................................................194
Oil Selection .......................................194, 236
Oil Synthetic ................................................194
Overheating ................................................ 185
Starting .......................................................... 71
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .150, 188
Ethanol .............................................................234
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............................ 166, 167
Exhaust System ...................................... 166, 200
Exterior Lighting ........................................ 36, 215
Exterior Lights ..........................36, 166, 214, 215
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................................................
194
Air Conditioning ...........................46, 195, 197
Engine Oil ...........................................194, 236
Engine Oil Disposal .................................... 194
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................36, 37
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................................... 168
Turn Signals .......................... 36, 68, 166, 215
Flat Tire Changing ..........................170, 216, 226
Flat Tire Stowage ............................177, 216, 226
Flooded Engine Starting .................................... 74
Fluid Capacities ............................................... 236
Fluid Leaks .......................................................166
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...........................................................203
Engine Oil ....................................................193
Fluid, Brake ......................................................237
Fog Lights ...........................................................36
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating .................... 27
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................... 22
Forward Collision Warning .............................. 129
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................186
Front Position Light ..........................................215
Fuel ...................................................................234
Additives ......................................................235
Clean Air ......................................................234
Ethanol ........................................................234
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................................90
Gasoline ...................................................... 234
Materials Added ......................................... 235
Methanol .....................................................234
Octane Rating ....................................234, 236
Requirements ............................................. 234
Specifications ............................................. 236
Tank Capacity ............................................. 236
Fuses ................................................................205
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................................
90
Gasoline, (Fuel) ................................................234
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................... 234
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................. 234
Gear Ranges ...................................................... 79
Glass Cleaning .................................................232
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................................. 92
245
11
GVWR ..................................................................91
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water ...............................
98
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................168
Head Restraints .................................................32
Headlights .......................................................... 36
Cleaning ...................................................... 231
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........36
Lights On Reminder ............................... 36, 38
Passing ................................................... 36, 37
Switch ............................................................ 36
Time Delay .....................................................36
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 35, 36
Heated Seats ..................................................... 32
Heater, Engine Block ..........................................74
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 124
Hitches ....................................................................
Trailer Towing ................................................ 93
Hood Prop ...........................................................53
Hood Release .....................................................53
I
Ignition ................................................................
12
Switch ............................................................ 12
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................. 35, 168
Instrument Cluster .............................................57
Descriptions .................................................. 68
Display ...........................................................58
Display Controls ............................................ 58
Menu Items ................................................... 60
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 232
Interior And Instrument Lights ..........................38
Interior Appearance Care ................................231
Interior Lights .....................................................38
J
Jack Location ...................................................
171
Jack Operation .................................................170
Jump Starting .................................................. 182
K
Key Fob ...............................................................
10
Arm The System ............................................16
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 16
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............11
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 11
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 11
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .........................................17
Passive Entry .................................................17
Keys .................................................................... 10
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals .........................
36
Lane Change Assist .................................... 36, 38
LaneSense ......................................................... 88
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................... 135
Latches .............................................................166
Hood .............................................................. 53
Lead Free Gasoline ......................................... 234
Leaks, Fluid ......................................................166
Life Of Tires ......................................................225
Liftgate ............................................................... 54
Power .............................................................54
Light Bulbs .............................................. 166, 215
Lights ................................................................166
Air Bag ......................................... 64, 142, 165
Battery Saver .................................................38
Brake Assist Warning ................................. 124
Brake Warning .............................................. 64
Bulb Replacement ............................. 214, 215
Cruise ......................................................68, 69
Daytime Running .......................................... 36
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 36
Engine Temperature Warning ...................... 65
Exterior ............................................... 166, 215
Headlights ...............................................36, 37
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................36
Instrument Cluster ........................................36
Intensity Control ............................................39
Interior ...........................................................38
Lights On Reminder ............................... 36, 38
246
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............................. 92
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........66
Park ............................................................... 68
Passing ................................................... 36, 37
Reading ......................................................... 38
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................... 65
Security Alarm ...............................................66
Service .........................................................214
Side Marker .................................................215
Traction Control ...........................................124
Turn Signals .......................... 36, 68, 166, 215
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ........................................... 65, 68
Load Floor, Cargo ...............................................55
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ........................62
Load Shed Battery Saver On .............................62
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .............. 62
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............62
Loading Vehicle ........................................... 55, 91
Tires .............................................................220
Locks
Child Protection .............................................16
Manual .......................................................... 16
Power Door .................................................... 16
Low Tire Pressure System ...............................131
Lubrication, Body .............................................198
Lug Nuts ...........................................................233
M
Maintenance Free Battery ..............................
193
Maintenance Schedule ...................................189
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) .........................................................66, 69
Manual
Park Release ...............................................185
Service .........................................................241
Map/Reading Lights ..........................................38
Marker Lights, Side ......................................... 215
Media Hub ..........................................................49
Methanol ..........................................................234
Mirrors ................................................................ 35
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 35
Exterior Folding ............................................. 36
Heated .................................................... 35, 36
Outside .......................................................... 35
Rearview ...............................................35, 168
Vanity ............................................................. 35
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ............................................................. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................131
Mopar Parts ..................................................... 240
MP3 Control ....................................................... 49
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................. 36
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period .............................
75
O
Occupant Restraints ........................................
134
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............234, 236
Oil Change Indicator .......................................... 59
Reset ............................................................. 59
Oil Filter, Change ............................................. 194
Oil Filter, Selection ...........................................194
Oil Pressure Light ...............................................65
Oil, Engine ...............................................194, 236
Capacity ...................................................... 236
Checking ..................................................... 193
Dipstick ....................................................... 193
Disposal ...................................................... 194
Filter ................................................... 194, 236
Filter Disposal .............................................194
Identification Logo ......................................194
Materials Added To .....................................194
Pressure Warning Light ................................ 65
Recommendation ..............................194, 236
Synthetic ..................................................... 194
Viscosity ...................................................... 236
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............................69
Operating Precautions .......................................69
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual .......................................... 241
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................................35
Overheating, Engine ........................................185
P
Paint Care ........................................................
230
Parking Brake .....................................................75
ParkSense System, Rear ...................................84
247
11
Passive Entry ......................................................17
Pets ...................................................................165
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........220
Power
Brakes .........................................................233
Mirrors ........................................................... 36
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 50
Seats ..............................................................30
Steering ......................................................... 80
Power Seats
Down ..............................................................31
Forward ..........................................................31
Rearward ....................................................... 31
Up ...................................................................31
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch .......................................20, 54
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................... 140
Preparation For Jacking ...................................171
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ....................................................140
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................
224
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 202
Radio Operation .............................................. 120
Radio Remote Controls ................................... 120
Rear Air Conditioning .........................................44
Rear Cross Path ...............................................128
Rear ParkSense System ....................................84
Rear Seat Reminder ........................................121
Rear View ........................................................... 35
Reclining Front Seats .........................................23
Recreational Towing ...........................................97
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 234
Refrigerant .......................................................196
Release, Hood ....................................................53
Reminder, Lights On .......................................... 36
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................................ 135
Remote Control
Starting System ............................................ 13
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ...............................................16
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 16
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............11
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 120
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 14
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ........................................................ 15
Uconnect Settings .........................................15
Remote Starting System ................................... 13
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 214
Replacement Tires .......................................... 225
Reporting Safety Defects ................................ 240
Restraints, Child .............................................. 151
Restraints, Head ................................................32
Rotation, Tires ................................................. 229
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..........................
165
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................... 166
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................... 240
Safety Information, Tire ...................................216
Safety Tips ........................................................164
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................................166
Schedule, Maintenance ..................................189
Screen Setup ......................................................61
Seat Belt Reminder ........................................... 65
Seat Belts ................................................134, 165
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................... 137
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 137
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ................................................... 137
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............140
Child Restraints .......................................... 151
Energy Management Feature .................... 140
Extender ......................................................139
Front Seat .......................................... 134–136
Inspection ................................................... 165
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 136
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ....................137
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................... 135
Operating Instructions ............................... 136
Pregnant Women ........................................140
Pretensioners ..............................................140
Rear Seat .................................................... 135
Reminder .................................................... 135
Seat Belt Extender ......................................139
Seat Belt Pretensioner ...............................140
Untwisting Procedure ................................. 137
Seat Belts Maintenance ..................................231
248
Seats ..................................................... 22, 31, 32
Adjustment .......................................22, 23, 31
Heated ...........................................................32
Power .............................................................30
Rear Folding .................................................. 22
Reclining ........................................................23
Seatback Release .........................................23
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ............................. 27
Tilting ...................................................... 22, 23
Security Alarm ....................................................66
Arm The System ............................................16
Disarm The System .......................................16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................... 236
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 12
Service Assistance .......................................... 238
Service Contract .............................................. 240
Service Manuals .............................................. 241
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ............................... 78
Shoulder Belts ................................................. 135
Side View Mirror Adjustment .............................35
Signals, Turn .............................. 36, 68, 166, 215
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ..............................228
Snow Tires ....................................................... 226
Spare Tire Changing ........................................ 170
Spare Tire Stowage ..........................................177
Spare Tires ..................................... 171, 226, 227
Specifications
Oil ................................................................ 236
Speed Control
Cancel ............................................................84
Resume ......................................................... 84
Starting ........................................................ 13, 71
Button ............................................................12
Cold Weather .................................................74
Engine Fails To Start ..................................... 74
Remote .......................................................... 13
Starting And Operating ...................................... 71
Starting Procedures ...........................................71
Steering .............................................................. 80
Tilt Column .................................................... 22
Wheel, Heated .............................................. 22
Wheel, Tilt ......................................................22
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .......................120
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ............................................................120
Storage ............................................................... 47
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ........................27
Stuck, Freeing ..................................................186
Sunglasses Storage ........................................... 47
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....143
Sway Control, Trailer ........................................125
Symbol Glossary ...................................................7
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................ 194
System, Remote Starting .................................. 13
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................
22
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 22
Time Delay
Headlight .......................................................36
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............220
Tire Markings ................................................... 216
Tire Safety Information ....................................216
Tire Service Kit .................................................177
Tire Stowage .....................................................177
Tires .......................................166, 222, 226, 229
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................... 225
Air Pressure ................................................ 222
Chains ......................................................... 228
Changing ..................................................... 170
Compact Spare ...........................................226
General Information ..........................222, 226
High Speed ................................................. 223
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 223
Jacking ................................................170, 172
Life Of Tires .................................................225
Load Capacity ............................................. 220
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(TPMS).............................................
60, 67, 131
Quality Grading ........................................... 229
Radial .......................................................... 224
Replacement .............................................. 225
Rotation .......................................................229
Safety ..................................................216, 222
Sizes ............................................................ 216
Snow Tires .................................................. 226
Spare Tires ................................ 171, 226, 227
Spinning ...................................................... 224
Trailer Towing ................................................ 96
Tread Wear Indicators ................................ 224
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................233
249
11
To Open Hood .....................................................53
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........................95
Towing .................................................................92
Disabled Vehicle ......................................... 187
Guide ............................................................. 93
Recreational ..................................................97
Weight ............................................................93
Towing Behind A Motorhome ............................ 97
Traction ...............................................................98
Traction Control ............................................... 125
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................... 125
Trailer Towing ..................................................... 92
Hitches .......................................................... 93
Minimum Requirements ...............................95
Tips ................................................................ 97
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............................95
Wiring .............................................................96
Trailer Towing Guide .......................................... 93
Trailer Weight ..................................................... 93
Transaxle
Automatic ...................................................... 77
Operation .......................................................77
Transmission ...................................................... 78
Automatic ............................................. 78, 204
Maintenance ...............................................204
Transporting Pets ............................................ 165
Tread Wear Indicators ..................................... 224
Turn Signals ........................................ 36, 68, 215
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings .........................................
15
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-Inch Display .... 101
Uconnect Settings ..................................................
Customer Programmable Features .......15, 17
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 17
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................229
Unleaded Gasoline ..........................................234
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....................137
USB ..................................................................... 49
V
Vanity Mirrors .....................................................
35
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............... 233
Vehicle Loading .........................................91, 220
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................194
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .......................7
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ......................................................
66
Warning Lights And Messages ..........................63
Washers, Windshield .......................................193
Washing Vehicle ...............................................231
Water
Driving Through .............................................98
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............................ 227
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............................. 227
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 53
Window Fogging .................................................46
Windows ............................................................. 51
Power ............................................................. 51
Windshield Defroster .......................................165
Windshield Washers .................................39, 193
Fluid .............................................................193
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................198
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 198
Wipers, Intermittent ...........................................39
Wrecker Towing ................................................187
250
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while
driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones
or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit
mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
First Edition
25_RUV_OM_EN_US
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada
Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CANADA
U.S.
mopar.com/om
